America's Tomorrow Press Coverage May-July 2011
-
Upload
pixel-prose-media-llc -
Category
News & Politics
-
view
326 -
download
3
description
Transcript of America's Tomorrow Press Coverage May-July 2011
IN THE NEWS
Table of Contents
EDITORIALS
―Americalsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation
―Is Our Racial Gap Becoming a Generation Gap
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT amp BLOGS)
The Daily Beast ―The Browning of America
Salon ―When Whites Say What About Melsquo
Colorlines ―Can You Picture Americalsquos Changing Demographics
Daily Mail ―Changing Face of America
SaludToday ―Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in the US
The Colorado Independent ―Americalsquos Tomorrowlsquo Map Underlines Folly of Coloradolsquos Latino-Alienating GOP
BET News ―People of Color Will Be New Majority
AOL Black Voices ―The Future Looks Brown
The Root ―Time-Lapse Map Shows Americalsquos Brown Future
News One ―Group Predicts Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
BET News ―Census Reveals that Minorities are the Majority in the United States
Colorlines ―More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 are of Color
Oakland Local ―PolicyLink Talks Race and Class in a Changing World
San Francisco Chronicle ―PolicyLink Talks Race and Class in a Changing World
NY Amsterdam News ―Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
RADIO
BBC Americana Inside the USA
KQED Forum
Southern California Public Radio
American Urban Radio Network
EDITORIALS
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Americas Tomorrow Equity In a Changing Nation
May 27 2011
The face of America is changing
And the fate of America hinges on how we react to -- and invest in -- those changes
By 2042 a majority of Americans will be people of color Already California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have
more people of color than whites And today nearly half of all children are kids of color
By definition if they dont succeed the nation wont succeed
There was a time not that long ago when we listened to the voices of tomorrow and invested in our national future The GI
Bill affirmative action and strong unions all helped the Greatest Generation establish a potent and stable middle class --
and gave their children tangible hope for the future
But we arent doing that any more
Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the dreams
and needs of our children Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind
them
The results are obvious -- people of color are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor
health and under-invested communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of color
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt White workers who need public transit to get to their jobs are hurt by
the lack of forward-thinking investment And white entrepreneurs are having to spend money giving new hires the job
skills a strong public school system should provide Thats no way to run a country
So how should America run
The answer is equity -- just and fair inclusion
For a long time this push for equity came draped in moral language -- we must invest equitably because it is the right
thing to do But economists and community leaders alike know that equity has become an economic imperative as well
as a moral one
In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card -- and it can be our most competitive asset In a
diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and depth of our talent could
once again be unrivaled -- if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
For America to compete moving forward we cant continue squandering the skills and potential of millions of young men
and women
As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old
black boy Our success depends on theirs
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Is Our Racial Gap Becoming a Generation Gap
July 14 2011
Since our founding older Americans have sacrificed significantly to ensure that future generations grow up in a nation
rich with promise and opportunity
But now with talk of cutbacks to education Medicaid public transportation and critical infrastructure many are reneging
on this historical commitment calling instead for the opportunity ladder to be pulled up entirely
What is the reason for this sudden divide
The answer may be nothing more complex or disheartening than Americas rapidly changing demographics
We know that by 2042 people of color will be the majority in America Already nearly half (465 percent) of our nations
young people are of color while more than 80 percent of seniors nationwide are white
It seems that this dramatic gap has transformed our nations unaddressed racial divide into a generational divide
For the first time Americas seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of
todays young For many this signals less obligation and commitment to the kinds of programs and resources that would
help provide a boost for the next generation
Were seeing this now with blocks and cuts to public education and sensible programs like Pell Grants YouthBuild
Corporation for National and Community Service (CNCS) and the DREAM Act all of which would provide Americas
youth with the tools and resources they need to compete and succeed in todays global economy
Its no wonder that the places where this divide is most pronounced -- like Arizona -- have become ground zero for racial
tension and anti-immigrant sentiment with older voters begrudgingly protecting their entitlements at the expense of
programs that serve young people particularly those in low-income areas and communities of color
And yet this kind of stingy self-interested policymaking hurts not just those who are African American Latino Asian
and Native American but the future of all young people including those who are white The white urban-dwelling family
that wants to send a child to public school is faced with the consequences of under-investment The young white worker
seeking to rely on public transportation is disappointed The impact of the racial divide extends beyond communities of
color
We cannot allow this to continue
Without targeted meaningful investments in our public schools higher education workforce development and job
creation programs -- as well as in the infrastructure and public transportation that make access to each possible - we will
all be left behind
Thankfully new and innovative policies are underway which will help strengthen nation-wide efforts to build
communities of opportunity in which everyone can prosper This week the Obama Administration launched the Strong
Cities Strong Communities initiative to foster local innovation and entrepreneurship in our nations cities And earlier this
month it was announced that $30 million is now available to continue funding the federal Promise Neighborhoods
program which would wrap poor children across the country in education health and social supports from the cradle-to-
college-to-career
Programs like these will help lay the foundation for a truly equitable and sustainable future for our nation
But for us to cross the finish line we must first see ourselves in the faces of Americas tomorrow
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
EDITORIALS
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Americas Tomorrow Equity In a Changing Nation
May 27 2011
The face of America is changing
And the fate of America hinges on how we react to -- and invest in -- those changes
By 2042 a majority of Americans will be people of color Already California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have
more people of color than whites And today nearly half of all children are kids of color
By definition if they dont succeed the nation wont succeed
There was a time not that long ago when we listened to the voices of tomorrow and invested in our national future The GI
Bill affirmative action and strong unions all helped the Greatest Generation establish a potent and stable middle class --
and gave their children tangible hope for the future
But we arent doing that any more
Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the dreams
and needs of our children Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind
them
The results are obvious -- people of color are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor
health and under-invested communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of color
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt White workers who need public transit to get to their jobs are hurt by
the lack of forward-thinking investment And white entrepreneurs are having to spend money giving new hires the job
skills a strong public school system should provide Thats no way to run a country
So how should America run
The answer is equity -- just and fair inclusion
For a long time this push for equity came draped in moral language -- we must invest equitably because it is the right
thing to do But economists and community leaders alike know that equity has become an economic imperative as well
as a moral one
In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card -- and it can be our most competitive asset In a
diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and depth of our talent could
once again be unrivaled -- if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
For America to compete moving forward we cant continue squandering the skills and potential of millions of young men
and women
As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old
black boy Our success depends on theirs
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Is Our Racial Gap Becoming a Generation Gap
July 14 2011
Since our founding older Americans have sacrificed significantly to ensure that future generations grow up in a nation
rich with promise and opportunity
But now with talk of cutbacks to education Medicaid public transportation and critical infrastructure many are reneging
on this historical commitment calling instead for the opportunity ladder to be pulled up entirely
What is the reason for this sudden divide
The answer may be nothing more complex or disheartening than Americas rapidly changing demographics
We know that by 2042 people of color will be the majority in America Already nearly half (465 percent) of our nations
young people are of color while more than 80 percent of seniors nationwide are white
It seems that this dramatic gap has transformed our nations unaddressed racial divide into a generational divide
For the first time Americas seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of
todays young For many this signals less obligation and commitment to the kinds of programs and resources that would
help provide a boost for the next generation
Were seeing this now with blocks and cuts to public education and sensible programs like Pell Grants YouthBuild
Corporation for National and Community Service (CNCS) and the DREAM Act all of which would provide Americas
youth with the tools and resources they need to compete and succeed in todays global economy
Its no wonder that the places where this divide is most pronounced -- like Arizona -- have become ground zero for racial
tension and anti-immigrant sentiment with older voters begrudgingly protecting their entitlements at the expense of
programs that serve young people particularly those in low-income areas and communities of color
And yet this kind of stingy self-interested policymaking hurts not just those who are African American Latino Asian
and Native American but the future of all young people including those who are white The white urban-dwelling family
that wants to send a child to public school is faced with the consequences of under-investment The young white worker
seeking to rely on public transportation is disappointed The impact of the racial divide extends beyond communities of
color
We cannot allow this to continue
Without targeted meaningful investments in our public schools higher education workforce development and job
creation programs -- as well as in the infrastructure and public transportation that make access to each possible - we will
all be left behind
Thankfully new and innovative policies are underway which will help strengthen nation-wide efforts to build
communities of opportunity in which everyone can prosper This week the Obama Administration launched the Strong
Cities Strong Communities initiative to foster local innovation and entrepreneurship in our nations cities And earlier this
month it was announced that $30 million is now available to continue funding the federal Promise Neighborhoods
program which would wrap poor children across the country in education health and social supports from the cradle-to-
college-to-career
Programs like these will help lay the foundation for a truly equitable and sustainable future for our nation
But for us to cross the finish line we must first see ourselves in the faces of Americas tomorrow
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
So how should America run
The answer is equity -- just and fair inclusion
For a long time this push for equity came draped in moral language -- we must invest equitably because it is the right
thing to do But economists and community leaders alike know that equity has become an economic imperative as well
as a moral one
In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card -- and it can be our most competitive asset In a
diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and depth of our talent could
once again be unrivaled -- if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
For America to compete moving forward we cant continue squandering the skills and potential of millions of young men
and women
As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old
black boy Our success depends on theirs
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Is Our Racial Gap Becoming a Generation Gap
July 14 2011
Since our founding older Americans have sacrificed significantly to ensure that future generations grow up in a nation
rich with promise and opportunity
But now with talk of cutbacks to education Medicaid public transportation and critical infrastructure many are reneging
on this historical commitment calling instead for the opportunity ladder to be pulled up entirely
What is the reason for this sudden divide
The answer may be nothing more complex or disheartening than Americas rapidly changing demographics
We know that by 2042 people of color will be the majority in America Already nearly half (465 percent) of our nations
young people are of color while more than 80 percent of seniors nationwide are white
It seems that this dramatic gap has transformed our nations unaddressed racial divide into a generational divide
For the first time Americas seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of
todays young For many this signals less obligation and commitment to the kinds of programs and resources that would
help provide a boost for the next generation
Were seeing this now with blocks and cuts to public education and sensible programs like Pell Grants YouthBuild
Corporation for National and Community Service (CNCS) and the DREAM Act all of which would provide Americas
youth with the tools and resources they need to compete and succeed in todays global economy
Its no wonder that the places where this divide is most pronounced -- like Arizona -- have become ground zero for racial
tension and anti-immigrant sentiment with older voters begrudgingly protecting their entitlements at the expense of
programs that serve young people particularly those in low-income areas and communities of color
And yet this kind of stingy self-interested policymaking hurts not just those who are African American Latino Asian
and Native American but the future of all young people including those who are white The white urban-dwelling family
that wants to send a child to public school is faced with the consequences of under-investment The young white worker
seeking to rely on public transportation is disappointed The impact of the racial divide extends beyond communities of
color
We cannot allow this to continue
Without targeted meaningful investments in our public schools higher education workforce development and job
creation programs -- as well as in the infrastructure and public transportation that make access to each possible - we will
all be left behind
Thankfully new and innovative policies are underway which will help strengthen nation-wide efforts to build
communities of opportunity in which everyone can prosper This week the Obama Administration launched the Strong
Cities Strong Communities initiative to foster local innovation and entrepreneurship in our nations cities And earlier this
month it was announced that $30 million is now available to continue funding the federal Promise Neighborhoods
program which would wrap poor children across the country in education health and social supports from the cradle-to-
college-to-career
Programs like these will help lay the foundation for a truly equitable and sustainable future for our nation
But for us to cross the finish line we must first see ourselves in the faces of Americas tomorrow
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Angela Glover Blackwell
Founder and CEO PolicyLink
Is Our Racial Gap Becoming a Generation Gap
July 14 2011
Since our founding older Americans have sacrificed significantly to ensure that future generations grow up in a nation
rich with promise and opportunity
But now with talk of cutbacks to education Medicaid public transportation and critical infrastructure many are reneging
on this historical commitment calling instead for the opportunity ladder to be pulled up entirely
What is the reason for this sudden divide
The answer may be nothing more complex or disheartening than Americas rapidly changing demographics
We know that by 2042 people of color will be the majority in America Already nearly half (465 percent) of our nations
young people are of color while more than 80 percent of seniors nationwide are white
It seems that this dramatic gap has transformed our nations unaddressed racial divide into a generational divide
For the first time Americas seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of
todays young For many this signals less obligation and commitment to the kinds of programs and resources that would
help provide a boost for the next generation
Were seeing this now with blocks and cuts to public education and sensible programs like Pell Grants YouthBuild
Corporation for National and Community Service (CNCS) and the DREAM Act all of which would provide Americas
youth with the tools and resources they need to compete and succeed in todays global economy
Its no wonder that the places where this divide is most pronounced -- like Arizona -- have become ground zero for racial
tension and anti-immigrant sentiment with older voters begrudgingly protecting their entitlements at the expense of
programs that serve young people particularly those in low-income areas and communities of color
And yet this kind of stingy self-interested policymaking hurts not just those who are African American Latino Asian
and Native American but the future of all young people including those who are white The white urban-dwelling family
that wants to send a child to public school is faced with the consequences of under-investment The young white worker
seeking to rely on public transportation is disappointed The impact of the racial divide extends beyond communities of
color
We cannot allow this to continue
Without targeted meaningful investments in our public schools higher education workforce development and job
creation programs -- as well as in the infrastructure and public transportation that make access to each possible - we will
all be left behind
Thankfully new and innovative policies are underway which will help strengthen nation-wide efforts to build
communities of opportunity in which everyone can prosper This week the Obama Administration launched the Strong
Cities Strong Communities initiative to foster local innovation and entrepreneurship in our nations cities And earlier this
month it was announced that $30 million is now available to continue funding the federal Promise Neighborhoods
program which would wrap poor children across the country in education health and social supports from the cradle-to-
college-to-career
Programs like these will help lay the foundation for a truly equitable and sustainable future for our nation
But for us to cross the finish line we must first see ourselves in the faces of Americas tomorrow
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
We cannot allow this to continue
Without targeted meaningful investments in our public schools higher education workforce development and job
creation programs -- as well as in the infrastructure and public transportation that make access to each possible - we will
all be left behind
Thankfully new and innovative policies are underway which will help strengthen nation-wide efforts to build
communities of opportunity in which everyone can prosper This week the Obama Administration launched the Strong
Cities Strong Communities initiative to foster local innovation and entrepreneurship in our nations cities And earlier this
month it was announced that $30 million is now available to continue funding the federal Promise Neighborhoods
program which would wrap poor children across the country in education health and social supports from the cradle-to-
college-to-career
Programs like these will help lay the foundation for a truly equitable and sustainable future for our nation
But for us to cross the finish line we must first see ourselves in the faces of Americas tomorrow
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
NEWS COVERAGE (PRINT AND BLOGS)
email permalink
18 May 2011
The Browning Of America
A map of demographic change
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
THURSDAY MAY 26 2011 0901 ET
When whites say What about me
New research shows a big jump in white Americans saying they face racism What are we missing here
BY JOAN WALSH
Did you know whites believe they face more racism than African-Americans do Thats what Ive been reading in the
news lately Two weeks ago the Wall Street Journal ran a short piece about an intriguing study by researchers at Tufts
and Harvard University under the headline White Americans See Anti-White Bias on the Rise Since then the New
York Times weighed in with a fascinating Room for Debate discussion titled Is Anti-White Bias a Problem TheRoot
likewise posed the findings as a question albeit more pointed White People Face the Worst Racism Wednesday
Gothamist declared flatly Regarding Racism Whites Think They Are the New Blacks
Whats going on here Black unemployment is double the white rate with black poverty on the rise and the mortgage
crisis hitting African-Americans hardest of all theres proof that lenders gave blacks higher-interest and subprime
mortgages even when they had the same income and credit rating as whites The drug war hits black people
disproportionately So how in Gods name can white people say they face worse racism And who are these white people
anyway
Well theyre 209 white people to be precise chosen to reflect census data in terms of age education and gender
according to Harvard Business School professor Michael Norton co-author (with Tufts Samuel Sommers) of the study
titled Whites see racism as a zero-sum game that they are now losing
Even if you think its plausible that whites are experiencing more anti-white bias in this rapidly diversifying country -- and
I do more on that later -- the results are stunning Not only do the white respondents believe anti-white racism has risen
enormously On a scale of 1 to 10 whites gave anti-white racism a 47 over the last decade up from 17 in the 1950s
They also seem to think its a bigger problem than anti-black racism which they gave a 91 in the 50s but only a 36 in the
00s (Blacks thought anti-white bias had risen slightly from 14 to 18)
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Norton points out that his study couldnt break down respondents by region the rural-urban divide by income or by
politics so its possible an over- or under-representation of a particular region class or partisan sample might skew the
results a little Its clearly not perfect but its as good as we could do Norton says noting that differences in education
and age didnt change the results Which didnt hugely surprise him Norton said given the prominence of big affirmative
action controversies like the New Haven firefighter suit or the Seattle school desegregation conflict in which whites have
claimed disadvantage So it isnt as though it never happens Norton says But where those controversies make big
headlines we dont look at disparities in child nutrition or lead poisoning or lots of other indicators showing how
African-Americans are still disadvantaged
I wasnt surprised to learn whites think anti-white bias is on the rise but that they think its a bigger problem than anti-
black racism is shocking and alarming Is it possible that some whites might experience more anti-white racism now
than they did 30 years ago Well not if youre trapped in the boundaries of discourse mostly defined in academia where
people of all races can be bigots or prejudiced but they can only be racist if they are a member of the socially
politically and economically dominant group But in our kaleidoscopic multiracial society racism is a term that like it
or not has come to be used by every group to cover slights ranging from a peer in one group not liking your group
someone consistently disrespecting your group to actual discrimination in education and employment The idea that
whites cant face racism seems silly In the San Francisco Bay Area where we have leaders of every race whites
disproportionately hold political and economic power although political power is more diffused But your chances of
having a non-white teacher boss co-worker firefighter beat cop prosecutor or judge are pretty high Grievances can be
misunderstood as racial they may in fact be racial
And in a society where whites will inevitably become a minority at some point in the next 40 years -- among California
schoolchildren they already are -- will those complaints matter Should they Its hard to know exactly how to analyze
Nortons data because its mute on what respondents consider anti-white bias Therefore its hard to know what if
anything to do In its Room for Debate feature on the whites and racism study the New York Times sought out Victoria
Plaut of the University of California-Berkeley Law School whose research on whites attitudes toward diversity are
fascinating Given the lack of information about the experiences and social class of the people in Nortons study its hard
to know whether Plauts work has direct relevance but its worth discussing nonetheless
Plauts research What About Me Perceptions of Exclusion and Whites Reactions to Multiculturalism with co-authors
Flannery G Garnett and Laura E Buffardi looked at five different studies designed to measure white and non-white
attitudes toward multiculturalism and diversity programs Plaut and her co-authors found maybe not surprisingly that
whites tended to feel excluded by multiculturalism where people of color felt included But this reaction could be
lessened or intensified by a couple of variables In one of the five studies one group read a description of
multiculturalism and diversity activities that made clear that the experiences of white Americans were part of the mix a
control group read an identical description with no mention of white Americans The whites who were told diversity
approaches included the experience of whites felt more included than those who were not In another study researchers
looked at subjects need to belong -- it has an acronym NTB who knew -- and found that whites with a strong need to
belong felt particularly excluded by activities and approaches around multiculturalism and diversity
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
In an experiment known as MeNot Me respondents were asked to quickly rate whether a series of terms having to do
with race ethnicity and diversity had anything to do with them personally It found that the white students related more
favorably to the terms associated with colorblindness -- equality unity sameness similarity color blind and color
blindness ndash than to words associated with multiculturalism diversity variety culture multicultural multiracial
difference and multiculturalism
What does this tell us The study authors (as do I) take for granted that it matters -- it would be a good thing -- if whites
embrace diversity and multicultural initiatives whether in schools workplaces and community groups and they therefore
suggest that people designing such programs consider that whiteslsquo reactions to multiculturalism hellip are rooted in the basic
social psychological need for inclusion and belonging Stressing that multiculturalism encompasses the wide variety of
white ethnic and class experiences might help Emphasizing words with positive resonance like equality and unity
might too
That makes sense to me As long as Ive been writing about the changing demography of California Ive wondered about
rhetoric that seems to leave whites out of the future Ive never been a huge fan of the people of color umbrella when
wielded politically It can be useful descriptively it can also provide (false) confidence that minority issues can gain
majority support without whites as long as African-American lawyers Cuban teachers Laotian refugees Caribbean
entrepreneurs Salvadoran doctors fourth-generation Chinese real estate moguls refugees from Mexican drug wars and
third-generation welfare recipients of any non-white race can all stick together in a grand coalition Good luck with that
Last week I sent around via Twitter a fascinating map produced by the group PolicyLink (disclosure Im on the board)
Americas Tomorrow which vividly shows the shifting demographic landscape between 1990 and 2040 (Ive embedded
it below) The map shows how America is changing and its a mind-blowing graphic tool But its silent about what it all
means I think it means that every generation or two Americans have to reinvent America and weve never come up with
an idea thats truly racially inclusive -- and were about to have to But that vision has to include white people -- and not
only as the scared seniors Ross Douthat warns wont be able to trust brown kids when its their turn to support them via
Social Security and Medicare I certainly dont think the map should be used as a way to scare white folks into investing in
brown kids -- or else
In all of these discussions I find myself thinking we need more empathy On that very point Michael Norton began his
article with a startling quote from Alabama Sen Jeff Sessions from the hearings on the nomination of Sonia Sotomayor to
the Supreme Court in 2009 which were racially divisive in a way they really didnt need to be During discussions on
judicial empathy Sessions opined that Empathy for one party is always prejudice against another Really What a sad
cynical worldview Its as though empathy is finite like money in your bank account or gas in your tank Theres also the
assumption that if non-white people get more power and influence theylsquoll wield it at the expense of white people the way
(many) white people did when the roles were reversed
I was raised to believe empathy was what made us human and that its reciprocal The capacity to stand in anothers shoes
and feel for them is one of our great advantages So I think weve got to try to understand why whites seem to believe
theyre facing more bias than African-Americans even if were inclined to roll our eyes and either hope its a research
problem (which I did) or hold on until what whites believe doesnt matter so much anymore I trust the next far-more-
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
multiracial generation to feel for older and younger people whatever their race I believe that makes us not only human
but American -- and I think I have a lot of company in that belief
Heres the Americas Tomorrow map Tell me what you think
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Can You Picture Americarsquos Demographic Future
by Asraa Mustufa
Friday May 27 2011
Welsquove reported on the countrylsquos changing demographics before PolicyLink recently released atime-lapse map showing
where people of color will become a majority in the US over the next 30 years
By 2042 people of color will constitute the majority of our population California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and
Washington DC already have more people of color than whites You can check out what counties and states will become
majority non-white by decade based on PolicyLinklsquos projections While these changes are expected to occur across the
country the map shows major concentrations of people of color projected for southern states
Last month Think Progress released a map showing racial demographics by county today They also featured some
neat infographics highlighting major changes over the last decade based on Census data
PolicyLink is a research institute dedicated to advancing economic and social equity Their CEO and founder Angela
Glover Blackwell said that the projections prove that the nationlsquos success depends on the success of people of color and
that equitable policies are increasingly becoming an economic imperative as well as a moral one
―Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment donlsquot see themselves reflected in the faces of
Americalsquos children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing in the
dreams and needs of our children she said ―As a nation we can see our future and it is captured in the hopes and dreams
of a 5-year-old Latina girl and a 7-year-old African American boy Our success depends on theirs
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
The changing face of America Time-lapse map reveals how non-whites will become the majority in US
within 30 years
By DAILY MAIL REPORTER Last updated at 252 PM on 27th May 2011
By the year 2040 the majority of Americans will be people of colour - the minorities will have become the majority
A fascinating new time-lapse map shows the increase in the non-white population across the decades
It starts with 1990 and then predicts up to 2020 2030 and 2040
The map titled the Map of Americas Tomorrow was produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to
social equity It illustrates what therootcom calls the decade-by-decade browning of America It is said to be the first
visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future
The all-inclusive term is used to describe their growth of the populations of blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink said This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face
of America is changing ndash and how quickly
Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority
Melting pot America can expect more and more integration according to PolicyLink
Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the
foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
The map however is causing some controversy One commenter said What a joke This does not compare population
density This does not differentiate between Native Indians Blacks Mexicans Chinese etc etc This is just some few
peoples wild guess put out for what reason This map appears to me to be a hate stimulator Nothing more
Looking to the future In the next ten years the trends will continue with more non-white people domination populations
of US counties
Another commentator added I am Chinese American and I objected to the grouping under Asian as coloured Chinese
Japanese and Koreans are not coloured Our complexion is white if not whiter than caucasians
Miss Blackwell said Today nearly half of all children are kids of colorBy definition if they dont succeed the nation
wont succeed Many in the still-majority white population and political establishment dont see themselves reflected in
the faces of Americas children They are talking far more about slashing Medicaid and education funding than investing
in the dreams and needs of our children
Too many who have achieved success for themselves now want to pull up the ladder behind them The results are obvious
- people of colour are disproportionately saddled with high poverty rates failing schools poor health and under-invested
communities
But these challenges dont only affect communities of colour
White families that rely on the public education system struggle with these nationwide school budget squeezes White
college students are graduating with six-figure debt Thats no way to run a country
Two months ago new census maps and data was released showing the stark geographical divide between Americas black
and Hispanic populations as they become increasingly concentrated on opposite ends of the country
The US black and Hispanic populations are mostly concentrated in the South - but whereas the black population is
centred in the Southeast Hispanics are mostly in the Southwest
The biggest general population rises were in the Southwest and Southeast but the largest falls came in the Midwest
according to 2010 Census Bureau data
Although Hispanics are concentrated in the Southwest other areas of the South such as Alabama have posted significant
gains in Hispanic population share
In many South states the Hispanic population has doubled on ten years ago with Hispanics outstripping whites for the
first time in New Mexico - 46 to 40 per cent
The Census 2010 statistics showed the number of Hispanics in the US reached 50million in 2010 with one in every six
Americans now a Latino They now represent 16 per cent of the US population of 309million Minority groups were
behind an unprecedented 90 per cent of total US population growth since 2000 due to immigration and higher Latino
birth rates
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
May 19 2011
Interactive Map Shows Swell of RacialEthnic Diversity in US This decade the majority of youths will be people of color By 2042 the nation will be a majority people of color From
Southern California to rural Iowa every corner of America is seeing these changes
What does this interactive map (a still shown below) say about the future of America
Go to the EquityBlog to add your thoughts
ShareSave
Tags America diversity EquityBlog minority people of color PolicyLink population growth
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Americarsquos Tomorrow map underlines folly of Coloradorsquos Latino-alienating GOP
By John Tomasic | 051911 | 435 pmShare
During the Colorado legislative session just passed and during the midterm elections last year state Republicans
embraced Arizona-style anti-illegal immigration policy proposals and harsh rhetoric that alienated Coloradans
including non-white Republican politicians and supporters and perhaps most dramatically Latino Republicans
Analysts called that kind of politics a sort of longterm suicide missiongiven the shifting demographics of the state An
internet map of the country put out today by PolicyLink brings the point home In the decades visualized by the mapndash
1990 to 2040ndash the population of the American southwest including Colorado transforms
Americarsquos Tomorrow from PolicyLink
Colorado lawmakers failed to complete a congressional redistricting map this session The courts now have to draw the
lines If the PolicyLink ―Americalsquos Tomorrow map is accuratendash and therelsquos no reason to believe itlsquos notndash Colorado semi-
swing districts 3 and 4 will see dramatic demographic change in the next two decades and beyond If GOP politics donlsquot
significantly evolve soon those districts even as theylsquore drawn right now will be the Democratslsquo to lose
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
People of Color Will Be the New Majority A PolicyLink map shows that by 2042 the nation will be more colorful
By Danielle Wright
Posted 05232011 1215 PM EDT
By 2042 people of color will be the new majority according to a new interactive map from PolicyLink a national
research and advocacy institute
The map shows the growth of people of color in America from 1990 to 2040 It is the first installment of a new
multimedia series called Americarsquos Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation The series will highlight Americalsquos old and
new demographics and the people who are addressing the change
One of those pioneers is Geoff Canada president and chief executive officer for Harlem Childrens Zone in Harlem New
York HCZ serves minority children from birthmdashwith a program called Baby College a series of workshops for parents
of children up to the age of threemdashto high school Canada used the map as a centerpiece for a talk he gave in London
entitled ―How to End Poverty
The majority of areas with populations of more than 50 percent people of color are in the Southwest according to the
map
(Photo PolicyLink)
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
The Future Looks Brown By Trymaine Lee on May 24th 2011 241PM
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity shows
the decade-by-decade browning of America The so-called Map of Americas Tomorrow shows that by the year 2042 the
majority of Americans will be people of color The map also shows the states and regions that will be most populated by
people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing ndash and how quickly said Angela
Glover Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by
2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a chord leaving no
doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start now
The we that Blackwell is referring to are those who influence policy such as legislators and policymakers according to
PolicyLink The group believes that the entire nation must take up the cause of advocacy on behalf of communities of
color particularly for fair equitable and targeted investments
According to the latest US Census data a growing list of major American cities have seen their native-born black
populations declining at an alarming rate - including Detroit New Orleans and Washington DC and among the biggest
losers Oakland and Chicago with losses of 25 percent and 17 percent respectively - over the past 10 years
Many upwardly mobile African Americans have moved to the suburbs or to the South Others still have been forced out of
major cities by gentrification Despite the shifts though experts and data indicate that the overall number of ethnic
minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
PolicyLink said until now there has been no visualization of what this future will look like
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Time-Lapse Map Shows Americas Brown Future
By Jeneacutee Desmond-Harris | Posted May 25 2011
Map of Americas Tomorrow (PolicyLink)
Its no huge secret that by that by the year 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Despite the fact that
many African Americans have moved out of major cities to the suburbs experts and data indicate that the overall number
of ethnic minorities including blacks will in total comprise the majority of America in the relatively near future
A recently released time-lapse map produced by PolicyLink a national research agency dedicated to social equity
provides a visual of this decade-by-decade browning of America The Map of Americas Tomorrow also shows the
states and regions that will be most populated by people of color including blacks HispanicsLatinos and Asians
This map makes crystal clear just how dramatically the face of America is changing -- and how quickly Angela Glover
Blackwell the Founder amp CEO of PolicyLink told AOL Black Voices Already nearly half of all young people are of
color and by 2040 people of color will become our nations majority Clearly this snapshot of our future has struck a
chord leaving no doubt that we must invest in and start building the foundation of tomorrows America today Lets start
now
This is being called the first visual representation of its kind of the countrys racial future Check out the time-lapse map
below or at PolicyLink
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Group Predicts That Minorities Will Become Majority By 2040
Written by NewsOne Staff on May 25 2011
PolicyLink a research group is predicting that the Black HispanicLatino and Asian populations will exceed that of
whites in America by 2040
VIDEO
―Already nearly half of all young people are of color and by 2040 people of color will become our nationlsquos majority
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Minority Babies Are the New Majority Census shows there are also more Black households headed by women than by Black married couples
By Frank McCoy
Posted 06232011 0731 AM EDT
Filed Under census
It was inevitable but some people are still going to be shocked
The Associated Press reports that for the first time in modern United States history minorities make up a majority of the
nationlsquos babies This reality is a combination of a burgeoning Hispanic population continued growth among Blacks and
Asian-Americans intermarriage and immigration by people of color from around the planet
Racial and ethnic minorities will be the US majority by midcentury And according to PolicyLink by 2042 people
of color will be the new majority
New census data also reveals that more Black children are likely to be raised without a father present in their lives as
there are now more Black households headed by women most of whom are single mothers than there are African-
American households with married couples
Politicians demographers and businesspeople will take note as the impact of greater numbers of minority children will
transform economic and government policies as well as commercial opportunites as the percentage of white older
Americans declines
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
More Than Half of US Children Under Age 2 Are Of Color
by Jorge Rivas
Friday June 24 2011
New census data reports that more than half of the children under age 2 in the US are of color The data is just one more
sign that the country is growing more diverse which is a cite of both excitement and anxiety for some lawmakers
The findings also reinforce the prediction that by 2042 the majority of Americans will be people of color Already
California Texas Hawaii New Mexico and DC have more people of color than whites
Last month PolicyLink a national research and advocacy institute released ―The Map of Americalsquos Tomorrow a time-
lapse map showing the growth of people of color in the United States from 1990 through 2040
Founder and CEO of PolicyLink Angela Glover Blackwell says the fate of America hinges on how we react to mdash and
invest in mdash those changes
―In the global economy our remarkable diversity will be our calling card- and it can be our most competitive asset she
writes in a blog post ―In a diverse and interconnected world America could be the most connected of all The breadth and
depth of our talent could once again be unrivaled - if we tap into the vast resource that is the next generation
Blackwell says to get to the connected country she speaks of equity is the answer ―Just and fair inclusion For everyone
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (VIDEO)
Susan Mernit Mon 27 Jun at 1134pm
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity
By Oakland Editorial Team
In this first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor - director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor ndash who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh ofUncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future ndash sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
PolicyLink talks race and class in a changing world (with VIDEO)
In the first video of the Americas Tomorrow series PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell interviews
Manuel Pastor director of the Program for Environmental and Regional Equity at the University of Southern California
In the interview Pastor -- who is also professor of Geography and American Studies and Ethnicity at USC and co-author
with Blackwell and Stewart Kwoh of Uncommon Common Ground Race and Americas Future -- sheds light on recent
US demographic changes and their impact on our nations future
This is part of a PolicyLink series on equity in a changing nation
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Ignoring the Unemployed at Our Peril
By David R Jones
The ―jobless recovery must seem like a sick joke for the 14 million Americans who are out of work But it didnlsquot really
hit home to us just how bad the situation is until the Community Service Societylsquos annual survey ―The Unheard Third
revealed last year that two-thirds of unemployed low-income New Yorkers surveyed reported being out of work for more
than a year with 31 percent jobless for three years or more
How do families survive when workers have been unemployed for that long To make matters worse there are signs of a
growing reluctance on the part of employers to hire the long term unemployed Perhaps this is because they have a
wealth of people scrambling for jobs But what are the prospects for these Americans What are we doing to ensure that
a generation of workers is not permanently left behind
Focus Is on the Deficit
The response from our political leaders They meet practically every day now to debate the ways to reduce the deficit
The fact of massive unemployment ndash the jobs deficit - has not engaged these officials Thus the problems of the economy
have been defined in terms of the deficit not the millions of jobless Here are some reasons why this may be so
The high unemployment rate has not affected the stock market or business profits which are booming There may also be
a generational gap that is becoming a racial gap while nearly half of the nationlsquos young people are of color more than 80
percent of seniors are white As Angela Glover Blackwell wrote in ―Americalsquos Tomorrow in PolicyLink ―For the first
time Americalsquos seniors business leaders and elected officials simply do not see themselves in the faces of todaylsquos
young
It may be the case that unemployment is seen as primarily affecting people of color and the less educated groups that lack
political clout This is certainly true in New York City Among low-income workers job losses are particularly steep
among black New Yorkers In the past year 22 percent of low-income black households lost a job compared to 17
percent of low-income white households Also low-income blacks are almost twice as likely as low-income whites to
have experienced long stretches of unemployment In 2009 only 9 percent of low-income blacks reported long stretches
of unemployment That figure expanded to 16 percent a year later
The effects of long-term joblessness have begun to set in among low-income New Yorkers Among the unemployed in
the CSS survey 76 percent of moderate and higher-income respondents thought that they could find a new job within a
year compared to 55 percent of low-income respondents But almost onethird of low-income respondents could not even
guess how long it will take to find a job Much of the mainstream media has bought the arguments of those who say we
should cut public spending and relax government regulations on business as the answer to the problem of unemployment
Historically this has not been true Cutting spending didnlsquot work for Herbert Hoover In 1932 in the depths of the Great
Depression Franklin D Roosevelt ran for president on a platform espousing a balanced budget But when he was elected
he gave up this idea and turned to government programs that put people to work like the Works Progress Administration
that employed millions of unskilled workers to carry out public works projects including the construction of public
buildings and roads Almost every community in the United States has a park bridge or school constructed by this
agency
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
Need to Be Proactive
If the federal government took a more proactive stance certain job creation proposals could significantly lower
unemployment including investing in transitional jobs programs such as the overhaul of our infrastructure and in energy
related industries as well as easing credit for the expansion of small businesses Even President Obamalsquos fiscal stimulus
as one sided as it was ndash mostly tax relief less on spending ndash was effective in creating and saving jobs
Public-private partnerships may be part of the answer to creating jobs A recent bill was introduced in the US Senate to
create an American Infrastructure Financing Authority that would provide private capital investment in infrastructure ndash
but with accountability and limited government liability And it would be owned by the taxpayers not private
shareholders Ideas like an infrastructure bank could provide one way to get around the political stalemate that now exists
in Washington over what to do about the economy
New York City could do something about this problem The Human Resources Administrationlsquos Back to Work program
ndash where almost all young applicants are sent to qualify for aid - is not a suitable option for most young people many of
whom have not yet held a job HRA should use this opportunity to reconnect these youth to educational services and job
training The city should also be tamping down critical flashpoints We have a chronically jobless group ndash young men of
color ndash who are indiscriminately and in huge numbers the target of police stop and frisk tactics that have more bearing on
repression than on fighting crime
Also the mayor simply ignored the fact that city summer jobs fell from 52000 to 28000 this year He could have called
in help from his generous donor list ndash no one in the city has a longer list ndash but he did nothing It simply wasnlsquot important
to him By ignoring the millions of the unemployed public officials are helping to create a vast underclass of the jobless
for years to come with all of the economic and social problems that would accompany it We should be defining job
creation as no less than crucial for the economic security of the nation
____________________________________________________________________
David R Jones is president and CEO of the Community Service Society (CSS) the leading voice on behalf of low-
income New Yorkers for over 168 years The views expressed in this column are solely those of the writer The
Urban Agenda is available on CSSrsquos website wwwcssnyorg
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America
RADIO
ldquoImmigration Debaterdquo
BBC Americana Inside the USA
June 5 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses race changing demographics and Americalsquos future
Oaklands Black Flight KQED Forum
July 7 2011
PolicyLink Founder amp CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses the decline of African American populations
in Oakland CA and major cities across the country in this hour-long interview also featuring Urban Habitat President and
CEO Allen-Fernandez Smith and Malo Hutson assistant professor of city and regional planning at UC Berkeley
The Nations Growing Ethnic-Generational Divide Illustrated Southern California Public Radio
July 19 2011
The third installment of the new PolicyLink multi-media series Americas Tomorrow Equity in a Changing Nation is
highlighted accompanied by an interactive chart illustrating Americas growing racial and generational divide
ldquoMinorities Become the Majorityrdquo
American Urban Radio Network
July 26 2011
PolicyLink Founder and CEO Angela Glover Blackwell discusses Americalsquos widening racial wealth gap and other issues
as explored in the Americalsquos Tomorrow series With an estimated 20 million listeners AURN is the largest network
reaching urban America